B.MAT II Main Qns
-
Upload
yavuz-keles -
Category
Documents
-
view
234 -
download
0
Transcript of B.MAT II Main Qns
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 122
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2 PMC(MAIN) - 1
S E A L
S E A L
S E A L
S E A L
BRILLIANTrsquoS
FULL SYLLABUS TEST 2FOR OUR STUDENTS
TOWARDSSSS
JOINT ENTRANCE EXAMINATION 2013
Time 3 hours Maximum marks 360IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
Name of the Candidate (in Capital letters) _____________________________________________
Roll Number in figures
in words ___________________________________________________________
Examination Centre Number
Name of Examination Centre (in Capital letters) ________________________________________
Candidatersquos Signature ____________________ Invigilatorrsquos Signature ___________________
983120983112983129983123983113983107983123 991251 983117983105983124983112983109983117983105983124983113983107983123 991251 983107983112983109983117983113983123983124983122983129
1 The Test Booklet consists of 90 questions The maximum marks are 360
2 There are three parts in the questions paper A B C consisting of Physics Mathematics andChemistry having 30 questions in each part of equal weightage Each question is allotted4(four) marks for each correct response
3 Candidates will be awarded marks as stated above in instruction No 2 for correct response ofeach question frac14 (one fourth) marks will be deducted for indicating incorrect response of eachquestion No deduction from the total score will be made if no response is indicated for an itemin the answer sheet
4 There is only one correct response for each question Filling up more than one response ineach question will be treated as wrong response and marks for wrong response will bededucted accordingly as per instruction 3 above
5 Use BlueBlack Ball Point Pen only for writing particulars marking response on side-1 andside-2 of the Answer Sheet Use of pencil is strictly prohibited
6 No candidate is allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits of papers pagermobile phone any electronic device etc except the Admit Card inside the examinationhallroom
7 Rough work is to be done on the space provided for this purpose in the Test Booklet only Thisspace is given at the bottom of each page and in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
JEE 2013
BMAT 2 (MAIN)
Dec 2012
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 222
2
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 2
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
1 A jet plane starts from rest at S = 0 and is
subjected to the acceleration shown
Determine the speed of the plane when
it has travelled 60m
( )2a m s
(1) 470ms (2) 365ms
(3) 265ms (4) 165ms
2 The number of times the hour and
minute hands of a 12 hour clock
coincide over a period of 12 hours is
(1) 12 (2) 11
(3) 14 (4) 10
3 A rifle with a muzzle velocity of 500 ms
in the horizontal direction shoots a bullet
at a small target 50m away How high
above the target must the gun be
aimed so that the bullet will hit thetarget
(1) 15cm (2) 10cm
(3) 5cm (4) 75cm
4 Find the current drawn by the circuit
shown below from the battery of 6V
with negligible internal resistance
Ω2
Ω5
Ω2Ω4
Ω10
6 V Ω
20
(1) 4 A (2) 3 A
(3) 2 A (4) 1 A
5 A wire has a mass ( )plusmn03 0003 g radius
( )plusmn ∆05 r mm and length ( )plusmn6 006 cm
The maximum percentage error in the
measurement of density is found to be
4 What is the error in radius
(1) 0005mm (2) 0004mm
(3) 0001mm (4) 0002mm
PART A PHYSICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 322
3
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 3
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
6 Find the equivalent resistance of thenetwork shown in figure
(1) Ω9
5 (2) Ω
8
5 (3) Ω
7
3 (4) Ω
5
2
7 A charge q is placed initially at thecentre of a cube of side a Then thecharge is shifted to the centre of a face
of the cube The flux passing throughthe face of the cube
(1) increases byε0
5q
(2) decreases byε0
4q
(3) decreases byε
q
3
(4) remains the same
8 Figure shows two conducting thinconcentric shells of radii r and R Theouter shell carries a charge q The innershell is initially neutral When it is
earthed a chargeq
4 flows from inner
shell to earth What is the radius of theouter shell
R
q
r
(1) 8r (2) 6r (3) 2r (4) 4r
9 Collars A and B slide along the fixed
right-angled rods and are connected
by a cord of length L Determine the
acceleration xa of collar B as a
function of y if collar A is given a
constant upward velocity Av
x
B
A
Ly
(1)
( )
minus
minus
2 2A
32 2 2
v L
L y
(2)
( )minus
2 2A
32 2 2
v L
L y
(3)
( )minus
2 2A3
2 2 2
2 v L
L y
(4)
( )minus
2 2A3
2 2 2
2 v L
2 L y
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 422
4
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 4
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
10 Block B has a mass m and is released
from rest when it is on top of wedge Awhich has a mass 3m Determine the
tension in cord CD needed to hold the
wedge from moving while B is sliding
down A Neglect friction
A
B
D
OC
θ
(1)
mg
cos22 θ (2)
mg
sin 22 θ
(3)mg
tan2
θ (4)mg
cot2
θ
11 A magnetic field of 340 10 kand
minus times
T
exerts a force 1040 i 30 j 10and and
minus + times
on
a particle having a charge minus910 C and
moving in the x-y plane What is the
speed of the particle
(1) 175 ms (2) 150 ms
(3) 125 ms (4) 105 ms
12 A disc of radius R starts at time t = 0
moving along the positive x-axis withlinear speed v and angular velocity ω
Find the y-coordinate of the point A at
time t
A
R
C
y
x
v
ω
(1) R (1 + sin ωt) (2) R(1 ndash sin ωt)
(3) R (1 ndash cos ωt) (4) R (1 + cos ωt)
13 A body of mass lsquomrsquo and density ρ is
kept suspended inside a liquid of
density ρL contained in a vessel The
vessel is allowed to fall freely with an
acceleration a What is the upthrust on
the body [mass of vessel plus liquid is
large compared to m]
(1) ( )ρ minusρ L
m
g a (2) ( )ρ minusρL
m
g a
(3) ( )ρ +ρ
Lm
g a (4) ( )ρ +ρL
mg a
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 522
5
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 5
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
14 What is the relative velocity of the
image in mirror (1) with respect to theimage in mirror (2) in situation as shown
in figure
object
v
mirror (2)
mirror (1) β
O
(1) βv sin (2) 2 v sin β
(3)2 v
sin β (4)
2 v
3 sinβ
15 A particle of mass m is in a parabolic
orbit about a fixed mass M Calculate
the angular momentum of m about M
where its nearest distance is b
(1)1
m GMb2
(2) m 2 GMb
(3) m GMb (4) GMmb
16 A stationary wave given by the differ-
rential equation2
2
d y
dt ( )= times
24
2
d y1225 10
dx
is set up in a gas column of length 12 m
closed at both ends What is thefrequency of the 4th over tone
(1) 284 Hz (2) 256 Hz
(3) 412 Hz (4) 438 Hz
17 A uniform cylinder of mass M and radius
R has a string wrapped around it Thestring is held fixed and the cylinder falls
vertically as in figure Find the tension in
the string
R
T
(1)Mg
3 (2)
Mg
4 (3)
Mg
6 (4)
Mg
8
18 Energy levels A B C of a certain atomcorresponds to values of energy
A B C E E and E 1 2λ λ and 3λ are the
wavelengths of radiations corresponding
to the transitions C to B B to A and C to
A respectively as shown in figure below
λ1
λ2 λ3
( )CC E
( )BB E
( )AA E
Ifλ λ
λ =λ + λ
1 23
1 2
then which of the
following is correct
(1) A BE E983100
(2) A B CE E E983102 983102
(3) A B CE E E983100 983100 (4) A C BE E E983102 983100
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 622
6
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 6
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
19 Photoelectric emission is observed from
a surface for frequencies 1f and 2f forthe incident radiation ( )1 2f f
983102
If the
maximum kinetic energies of the
photoelectrons in the two cases are in
the ratio 1 k then the threshold
frequency ν
is given by
(1) 2 1f f
k 1
minus
minus (2) 2 1k f f
k 1
minus
minus
(3) 1 2k f f
k 1
minus
minus (4) 2 1f f
k
minus
20 The element curium 24896Cm has a
mean life of 1310 seconds Its primary
decay modes are spontaneous fission
and alpha decay the former with a
probability of x Each fission releases
200 MeV of energy The masses involved
in α minus decay are as follows
=24896Cm 24807 2220 u
=21494Pu 244064100 u
=42He 400 2603 u
If a sample of 2010 Cm atoms produces
a power output of5
33 10 W minus
times what isthe value of x
(1) 32 (2) 16
(3) 64 (4) 8
21 An object is placed at A (OA gt f) Here f
is the focal length of the lens Theimage is formed at B A perpendicular
erected between O and C is chosen
such that = BCA 90 Let OA = a OB = b
and OC = c Then the value of f i s
A B
C
O
(1)( )
3
2
a b
c
+ (2)
2c
a b
+
(3)( )
( )
a b c
a c
+
+ (4)
2a
a b c
+ +
22 In Youngrsquos double slit experiment
fringes are obtained on a screen
placed at some distance from the
plane of slits If the screen is moved by25 10 mminustimes towards the slits the change
in fringe width is minustimes 53 10 m If the
distance between the slits is 310 m minus
calculate the wavelength of light used
(1) 6000 A (2) 5500 A
(3) 4500 A (4) 6500 A
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 722
7
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 7
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
23 A body cools in a surrounding which is
at a constant temperature of θ0 Its
temperature θ is plotted against time
lsquotrsquo Tangents are drawn to the curve at
the points ( )θ = θ2P and ( )θ = θ1Q
These tangents meet the time axis at
angles of 2φ and 1φ as shown in figure
Then
θ2
θ1
θ0
P
Q
φ1φ2
θ
t
(1) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 01
2 1 0
cot
cot
(2) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 02
1 1 0
cot
cot
(3) 1 2
2 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
(4) 2 2
1 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
24 A gas undergoes a change of state
during which 100 J of heat is supplied toit and it does 20 J of work The system is
brought back to its original state
through a process during which 20 J of
heat is released by the gas What is the
work done by the gas in the second
process
(1) 20 J (2) 40 J
(3) 60 J (4) 80 J
25 In the circuit shown in figure the switch
S is kept in position 1 for a long time and
then it is shifted to position 2 at t = 0 Theenergy dissipated as thermal energy
through resistor R in time t = 0 to2 L
tR
=
is
E
L
S1
2
R
(1)2
2
L E
2R (2)
2 2
2 2
L E e 1
2R e
minus
(3) ( )2
4
2
L E1 e
2Rminus (4)
2 4
2 4
L E e 1
2R e
minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 222
2
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 2
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
1 A jet plane starts from rest at S = 0 and is
subjected to the acceleration shown
Determine the speed of the plane when
it has travelled 60m
( )2a m s
(1) 470ms (2) 365ms
(3) 265ms (4) 165ms
2 The number of times the hour and
minute hands of a 12 hour clock
coincide over a period of 12 hours is
(1) 12 (2) 11
(3) 14 (4) 10
3 A rifle with a muzzle velocity of 500 ms
in the horizontal direction shoots a bullet
at a small target 50m away How high
above the target must the gun be
aimed so that the bullet will hit thetarget
(1) 15cm (2) 10cm
(3) 5cm (4) 75cm
4 Find the current drawn by the circuit
shown below from the battery of 6V
with negligible internal resistance
Ω2
Ω5
Ω2Ω4
Ω10
6 V Ω
20
(1) 4 A (2) 3 A
(3) 2 A (4) 1 A
5 A wire has a mass ( )plusmn03 0003 g radius
( )plusmn ∆05 r mm and length ( )plusmn6 006 cm
The maximum percentage error in the
measurement of density is found to be
4 What is the error in radius
(1) 0005mm (2) 0004mm
(3) 0001mm (4) 0002mm
PART A PHYSICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 322
3
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 3
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
6 Find the equivalent resistance of thenetwork shown in figure
(1) Ω9
5 (2) Ω
8
5 (3) Ω
7
3 (4) Ω
5
2
7 A charge q is placed initially at thecentre of a cube of side a Then thecharge is shifted to the centre of a face
of the cube The flux passing throughthe face of the cube
(1) increases byε0
5q
(2) decreases byε0
4q
(3) decreases byε
q
3
(4) remains the same
8 Figure shows two conducting thinconcentric shells of radii r and R Theouter shell carries a charge q The innershell is initially neutral When it is
earthed a chargeq
4 flows from inner
shell to earth What is the radius of theouter shell
R
q
r
(1) 8r (2) 6r (3) 2r (4) 4r
9 Collars A and B slide along the fixed
right-angled rods and are connected
by a cord of length L Determine the
acceleration xa of collar B as a
function of y if collar A is given a
constant upward velocity Av
x
B
A
Ly
(1)
( )
minus
minus
2 2A
32 2 2
v L
L y
(2)
( )minus
2 2A
32 2 2
v L
L y
(3)
( )minus
2 2A3
2 2 2
2 v L
L y
(4)
( )minus
2 2A3
2 2 2
2 v L
2 L y
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 422
4
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 4
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
10 Block B has a mass m and is released
from rest when it is on top of wedge Awhich has a mass 3m Determine the
tension in cord CD needed to hold the
wedge from moving while B is sliding
down A Neglect friction
A
B
D
OC
θ
(1)
mg
cos22 θ (2)
mg
sin 22 θ
(3)mg
tan2
θ (4)mg
cot2
θ
11 A magnetic field of 340 10 kand
minus times
T
exerts a force 1040 i 30 j 10and and
minus + times
on
a particle having a charge minus910 C and
moving in the x-y plane What is the
speed of the particle
(1) 175 ms (2) 150 ms
(3) 125 ms (4) 105 ms
12 A disc of radius R starts at time t = 0
moving along the positive x-axis withlinear speed v and angular velocity ω
Find the y-coordinate of the point A at
time t
A
R
C
y
x
v
ω
(1) R (1 + sin ωt) (2) R(1 ndash sin ωt)
(3) R (1 ndash cos ωt) (4) R (1 + cos ωt)
13 A body of mass lsquomrsquo and density ρ is
kept suspended inside a liquid of
density ρL contained in a vessel The
vessel is allowed to fall freely with an
acceleration a What is the upthrust on
the body [mass of vessel plus liquid is
large compared to m]
(1) ( )ρ minusρ L
m
g a (2) ( )ρ minusρL
m
g a
(3) ( )ρ +ρ
Lm
g a (4) ( )ρ +ρL
mg a
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 522
5
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 5
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
14 What is the relative velocity of the
image in mirror (1) with respect to theimage in mirror (2) in situation as shown
in figure
object
v
mirror (2)
mirror (1) β
O
(1) βv sin (2) 2 v sin β
(3)2 v
sin β (4)
2 v
3 sinβ
15 A particle of mass m is in a parabolic
orbit about a fixed mass M Calculate
the angular momentum of m about M
where its nearest distance is b
(1)1
m GMb2
(2) m 2 GMb
(3) m GMb (4) GMmb
16 A stationary wave given by the differ-
rential equation2
2
d y
dt ( )= times
24
2
d y1225 10
dx
is set up in a gas column of length 12 m
closed at both ends What is thefrequency of the 4th over tone
(1) 284 Hz (2) 256 Hz
(3) 412 Hz (4) 438 Hz
17 A uniform cylinder of mass M and radius
R has a string wrapped around it Thestring is held fixed and the cylinder falls
vertically as in figure Find the tension in
the string
R
T
(1)Mg
3 (2)
Mg
4 (3)
Mg
6 (4)
Mg
8
18 Energy levels A B C of a certain atomcorresponds to values of energy
A B C E E and E 1 2λ λ and 3λ are the
wavelengths of radiations corresponding
to the transitions C to B B to A and C to
A respectively as shown in figure below
λ1
λ2 λ3
( )CC E
( )BB E
( )AA E
Ifλ λ
λ =λ + λ
1 23
1 2
then which of the
following is correct
(1) A BE E983100
(2) A B CE E E983102 983102
(3) A B CE E E983100 983100 (4) A C BE E E983102 983100
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 622
6
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 6
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
19 Photoelectric emission is observed from
a surface for frequencies 1f and 2f forthe incident radiation ( )1 2f f
983102
If the
maximum kinetic energies of the
photoelectrons in the two cases are in
the ratio 1 k then the threshold
frequency ν
is given by
(1) 2 1f f
k 1
minus
minus (2) 2 1k f f
k 1
minus
minus
(3) 1 2k f f
k 1
minus
minus (4) 2 1f f
k
minus
20 The element curium 24896Cm has a
mean life of 1310 seconds Its primary
decay modes are spontaneous fission
and alpha decay the former with a
probability of x Each fission releases
200 MeV of energy The masses involved
in α minus decay are as follows
=24896Cm 24807 2220 u
=21494Pu 244064100 u
=42He 400 2603 u
If a sample of 2010 Cm atoms produces
a power output of5
33 10 W minus
times what isthe value of x
(1) 32 (2) 16
(3) 64 (4) 8
21 An object is placed at A (OA gt f) Here f
is the focal length of the lens Theimage is formed at B A perpendicular
erected between O and C is chosen
such that = BCA 90 Let OA = a OB = b
and OC = c Then the value of f i s
A B
C
O
(1)( )
3
2
a b
c
+ (2)
2c
a b
+
(3)( )
( )
a b c
a c
+
+ (4)
2a
a b c
+ +
22 In Youngrsquos double slit experiment
fringes are obtained on a screen
placed at some distance from the
plane of slits If the screen is moved by25 10 mminustimes towards the slits the change
in fringe width is minustimes 53 10 m If the
distance between the slits is 310 m minus
calculate the wavelength of light used
(1) 6000 A (2) 5500 A
(3) 4500 A (4) 6500 A
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 722
7
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 7
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
23 A body cools in a surrounding which is
at a constant temperature of θ0 Its
temperature θ is plotted against time
lsquotrsquo Tangents are drawn to the curve at
the points ( )θ = θ2P and ( )θ = θ1Q
These tangents meet the time axis at
angles of 2φ and 1φ as shown in figure
Then
θ2
θ1
θ0
P
Q
φ1φ2
θ
t
(1) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 01
2 1 0
cot
cot
(2) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 02
1 1 0
cot
cot
(3) 1 2
2 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
(4) 2 2
1 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
24 A gas undergoes a change of state
during which 100 J of heat is supplied toit and it does 20 J of work The system is
brought back to its original state
through a process during which 20 J of
heat is released by the gas What is the
work done by the gas in the second
process
(1) 20 J (2) 40 J
(3) 60 J (4) 80 J
25 In the circuit shown in figure the switch
S is kept in position 1 for a long time and
then it is shifted to position 2 at t = 0 Theenergy dissipated as thermal energy
through resistor R in time t = 0 to2 L
tR
=
is
E
L
S1
2
R
(1)2
2
L E
2R (2)
2 2
2 2
L E e 1
2R e
minus
(3) ( )2
4
2
L E1 e
2Rminus (4)
2 4
2 4
L E e 1
2R e
minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 322
3
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 3
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
6 Find the equivalent resistance of thenetwork shown in figure
(1) Ω9
5 (2) Ω
8
5 (3) Ω
7
3 (4) Ω
5
2
7 A charge q is placed initially at thecentre of a cube of side a Then thecharge is shifted to the centre of a face
of the cube The flux passing throughthe face of the cube
(1) increases byε0
5q
(2) decreases byε0
4q
(3) decreases byε
q
3
(4) remains the same
8 Figure shows two conducting thinconcentric shells of radii r and R Theouter shell carries a charge q The innershell is initially neutral When it is
earthed a chargeq
4 flows from inner
shell to earth What is the radius of theouter shell
R
q
r
(1) 8r (2) 6r (3) 2r (4) 4r
9 Collars A and B slide along the fixed
right-angled rods and are connected
by a cord of length L Determine the
acceleration xa of collar B as a
function of y if collar A is given a
constant upward velocity Av
x
B
A
Ly
(1)
( )
minus
minus
2 2A
32 2 2
v L
L y
(2)
( )minus
2 2A
32 2 2
v L
L y
(3)
( )minus
2 2A3
2 2 2
2 v L
L y
(4)
( )minus
2 2A3
2 2 2
2 v L
2 L y
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 422
4
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 4
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
10 Block B has a mass m and is released
from rest when it is on top of wedge Awhich has a mass 3m Determine the
tension in cord CD needed to hold the
wedge from moving while B is sliding
down A Neglect friction
A
B
D
OC
θ
(1)
mg
cos22 θ (2)
mg
sin 22 θ
(3)mg
tan2
θ (4)mg
cot2
θ
11 A magnetic field of 340 10 kand
minus times
T
exerts a force 1040 i 30 j 10and and
minus + times
on
a particle having a charge minus910 C and
moving in the x-y plane What is the
speed of the particle
(1) 175 ms (2) 150 ms
(3) 125 ms (4) 105 ms
12 A disc of radius R starts at time t = 0
moving along the positive x-axis withlinear speed v and angular velocity ω
Find the y-coordinate of the point A at
time t
A
R
C
y
x
v
ω
(1) R (1 + sin ωt) (2) R(1 ndash sin ωt)
(3) R (1 ndash cos ωt) (4) R (1 + cos ωt)
13 A body of mass lsquomrsquo and density ρ is
kept suspended inside a liquid of
density ρL contained in a vessel The
vessel is allowed to fall freely with an
acceleration a What is the upthrust on
the body [mass of vessel plus liquid is
large compared to m]
(1) ( )ρ minusρ L
m
g a (2) ( )ρ minusρL
m
g a
(3) ( )ρ +ρ
Lm
g a (4) ( )ρ +ρL
mg a
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 522
5
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 5
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
14 What is the relative velocity of the
image in mirror (1) with respect to theimage in mirror (2) in situation as shown
in figure
object
v
mirror (2)
mirror (1) β
O
(1) βv sin (2) 2 v sin β
(3)2 v
sin β (4)
2 v
3 sinβ
15 A particle of mass m is in a parabolic
orbit about a fixed mass M Calculate
the angular momentum of m about M
where its nearest distance is b
(1)1
m GMb2
(2) m 2 GMb
(3) m GMb (4) GMmb
16 A stationary wave given by the differ-
rential equation2
2
d y
dt ( )= times
24
2
d y1225 10
dx
is set up in a gas column of length 12 m
closed at both ends What is thefrequency of the 4th over tone
(1) 284 Hz (2) 256 Hz
(3) 412 Hz (4) 438 Hz
17 A uniform cylinder of mass M and radius
R has a string wrapped around it Thestring is held fixed and the cylinder falls
vertically as in figure Find the tension in
the string
R
T
(1)Mg
3 (2)
Mg
4 (3)
Mg
6 (4)
Mg
8
18 Energy levels A B C of a certain atomcorresponds to values of energy
A B C E E and E 1 2λ λ and 3λ are the
wavelengths of radiations corresponding
to the transitions C to B B to A and C to
A respectively as shown in figure below
λ1
λ2 λ3
( )CC E
( )BB E
( )AA E
Ifλ λ
λ =λ + λ
1 23
1 2
then which of the
following is correct
(1) A BE E983100
(2) A B CE E E983102 983102
(3) A B CE E E983100 983100 (4) A C BE E E983102 983100
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 622
6
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 6
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
19 Photoelectric emission is observed from
a surface for frequencies 1f and 2f forthe incident radiation ( )1 2f f
983102
If the
maximum kinetic energies of the
photoelectrons in the two cases are in
the ratio 1 k then the threshold
frequency ν
is given by
(1) 2 1f f
k 1
minus
minus (2) 2 1k f f
k 1
minus
minus
(3) 1 2k f f
k 1
minus
minus (4) 2 1f f
k
minus
20 The element curium 24896Cm has a
mean life of 1310 seconds Its primary
decay modes are spontaneous fission
and alpha decay the former with a
probability of x Each fission releases
200 MeV of energy The masses involved
in α minus decay are as follows
=24896Cm 24807 2220 u
=21494Pu 244064100 u
=42He 400 2603 u
If a sample of 2010 Cm atoms produces
a power output of5
33 10 W minus
times what isthe value of x
(1) 32 (2) 16
(3) 64 (4) 8
21 An object is placed at A (OA gt f) Here f
is the focal length of the lens Theimage is formed at B A perpendicular
erected between O and C is chosen
such that = BCA 90 Let OA = a OB = b
and OC = c Then the value of f i s
A B
C
O
(1)( )
3
2
a b
c
+ (2)
2c
a b
+
(3)( )
( )
a b c
a c
+
+ (4)
2a
a b c
+ +
22 In Youngrsquos double slit experiment
fringes are obtained on a screen
placed at some distance from the
plane of slits If the screen is moved by25 10 mminustimes towards the slits the change
in fringe width is minustimes 53 10 m If the
distance between the slits is 310 m minus
calculate the wavelength of light used
(1) 6000 A (2) 5500 A
(3) 4500 A (4) 6500 A
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 722
7
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 7
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
23 A body cools in a surrounding which is
at a constant temperature of θ0 Its
temperature θ is plotted against time
lsquotrsquo Tangents are drawn to the curve at
the points ( )θ = θ2P and ( )θ = θ1Q
These tangents meet the time axis at
angles of 2φ and 1φ as shown in figure
Then
θ2
θ1
θ0
P
Q
φ1φ2
θ
t
(1) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 01
2 1 0
cot
cot
(2) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 02
1 1 0
cot
cot
(3) 1 2
2 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
(4) 2 2
1 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
24 A gas undergoes a change of state
during which 100 J of heat is supplied toit and it does 20 J of work The system is
brought back to its original state
through a process during which 20 J of
heat is released by the gas What is the
work done by the gas in the second
process
(1) 20 J (2) 40 J
(3) 60 J (4) 80 J
25 In the circuit shown in figure the switch
S is kept in position 1 for a long time and
then it is shifted to position 2 at t = 0 Theenergy dissipated as thermal energy
through resistor R in time t = 0 to2 L
tR
=
is
E
L
S1
2
R
(1)2
2
L E
2R (2)
2 2
2 2
L E e 1
2R e
minus
(3) ( )2
4
2
L E1 e
2Rminus (4)
2 4
2 4
L E e 1
2R e
minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 422
4
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 4
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
10 Block B has a mass m and is released
from rest when it is on top of wedge Awhich has a mass 3m Determine the
tension in cord CD needed to hold the
wedge from moving while B is sliding
down A Neglect friction
A
B
D
OC
θ
(1)
mg
cos22 θ (2)
mg
sin 22 θ
(3)mg
tan2
θ (4)mg
cot2
θ
11 A magnetic field of 340 10 kand
minus times
T
exerts a force 1040 i 30 j 10and and
minus + times
on
a particle having a charge minus910 C and
moving in the x-y plane What is the
speed of the particle
(1) 175 ms (2) 150 ms
(3) 125 ms (4) 105 ms
12 A disc of radius R starts at time t = 0
moving along the positive x-axis withlinear speed v and angular velocity ω
Find the y-coordinate of the point A at
time t
A
R
C
y
x
v
ω
(1) R (1 + sin ωt) (2) R(1 ndash sin ωt)
(3) R (1 ndash cos ωt) (4) R (1 + cos ωt)
13 A body of mass lsquomrsquo and density ρ is
kept suspended inside a liquid of
density ρL contained in a vessel The
vessel is allowed to fall freely with an
acceleration a What is the upthrust on
the body [mass of vessel plus liquid is
large compared to m]
(1) ( )ρ minusρ L
m
g a (2) ( )ρ minusρL
m
g a
(3) ( )ρ +ρ
Lm
g a (4) ( )ρ +ρL
mg a
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 522
5
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 5
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
14 What is the relative velocity of the
image in mirror (1) with respect to theimage in mirror (2) in situation as shown
in figure
object
v
mirror (2)
mirror (1) β
O
(1) βv sin (2) 2 v sin β
(3)2 v
sin β (4)
2 v
3 sinβ
15 A particle of mass m is in a parabolic
orbit about a fixed mass M Calculate
the angular momentum of m about M
where its nearest distance is b
(1)1
m GMb2
(2) m 2 GMb
(3) m GMb (4) GMmb
16 A stationary wave given by the differ-
rential equation2
2
d y
dt ( )= times
24
2
d y1225 10
dx
is set up in a gas column of length 12 m
closed at both ends What is thefrequency of the 4th over tone
(1) 284 Hz (2) 256 Hz
(3) 412 Hz (4) 438 Hz
17 A uniform cylinder of mass M and radius
R has a string wrapped around it Thestring is held fixed and the cylinder falls
vertically as in figure Find the tension in
the string
R
T
(1)Mg
3 (2)
Mg
4 (3)
Mg
6 (4)
Mg
8
18 Energy levels A B C of a certain atomcorresponds to values of energy
A B C E E and E 1 2λ λ and 3λ are the
wavelengths of radiations corresponding
to the transitions C to B B to A and C to
A respectively as shown in figure below
λ1
λ2 λ3
( )CC E
( )BB E
( )AA E
Ifλ λ
λ =λ + λ
1 23
1 2
then which of the
following is correct
(1) A BE E983100
(2) A B CE E E983102 983102
(3) A B CE E E983100 983100 (4) A C BE E E983102 983100
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 622
6
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 6
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
19 Photoelectric emission is observed from
a surface for frequencies 1f and 2f forthe incident radiation ( )1 2f f
983102
If the
maximum kinetic energies of the
photoelectrons in the two cases are in
the ratio 1 k then the threshold
frequency ν
is given by
(1) 2 1f f
k 1
minus
minus (2) 2 1k f f
k 1
minus
minus
(3) 1 2k f f
k 1
minus
minus (4) 2 1f f
k
minus
20 The element curium 24896Cm has a
mean life of 1310 seconds Its primary
decay modes are spontaneous fission
and alpha decay the former with a
probability of x Each fission releases
200 MeV of energy The masses involved
in α minus decay are as follows
=24896Cm 24807 2220 u
=21494Pu 244064100 u
=42He 400 2603 u
If a sample of 2010 Cm atoms produces
a power output of5
33 10 W minus
times what isthe value of x
(1) 32 (2) 16
(3) 64 (4) 8
21 An object is placed at A (OA gt f) Here f
is the focal length of the lens Theimage is formed at B A perpendicular
erected between O and C is chosen
such that = BCA 90 Let OA = a OB = b
and OC = c Then the value of f i s
A B
C
O
(1)( )
3
2
a b
c
+ (2)
2c
a b
+
(3)( )
( )
a b c
a c
+
+ (4)
2a
a b c
+ +
22 In Youngrsquos double slit experiment
fringes are obtained on a screen
placed at some distance from the
plane of slits If the screen is moved by25 10 mminustimes towards the slits the change
in fringe width is minustimes 53 10 m If the
distance between the slits is 310 m minus
calculate the wavelength of light used
(1) 6000 A (2) 5500 A
(3) 4500 A (4) 6500 A
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 722
7
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 7
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
23 A body cools in a surrounding which is
at a constant temperature of θ0 Its
temperature θ is plotted against time
lsquotrsquo Tangents are drawn to the curve at
the points ( )θ = θ2P and ( )θ = θ1Q
These tangents meet the time axis at
angles of 2φ and 1φ as shown in figure
Then
θ2
θ1
θ0
P
Q
φ1φ2
θ
t
(1) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 01
2 1 0
cot
cot
(2) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 02
1 1 0
cot
cot
(3) 1 2
2 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
(4) 2 2
1 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
24 A gas undergoes a change of state
during which 100 J of heat is supplied toit and it does 20 J of work The system is
brought back to its original state
through a process during which 20 J of
heat is released by the gas What is the
work done by the gas in the second
process
(1) 20 J (2) 40 J
(3) 60 J (4) 80 J
25 In the circuit shown in figure the switch
S is kept in position 1 for a long time and
then it is shifted to position 2 at t = 0 Theenergy dissipated as thermal energy
through resistor R in time t = 0 to2 L
tR
=
is
E
L
S1
2
R
(1)2
2
L E
2R (2)
2 2
2 2
L E e 1
2R e
minus
(3) ( )2
4
2
L E1 e
2Rminus (4)
2 4
2 4
L E e 1
2R e
minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 522
5
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 5
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
14 What is the relative velocity of the
image in mirror (1) with respect to theimage in mirror (2) in situation as shown
in figure
object
v
mirror (2)
mirror (1) β
O
(1) βv sin (2) 2 v sin β
(3)2 v
sin β (4)
2 v
3 sinβ
15 A particle of mass m is in a parabolic
orbit about a fixed mass M Calculate
the angular momentum of m about M
where its nearest distance is b
(1)1
m GMb2
(2) m 2 GMb
(3) m GMb (4) GMmb
16 A stationary wave given by the differ-
rential equation2
2
d y
dt ( )= times
24
2
d y1225 10
dx
is set up in a gas column of length 12 m
closed at both ends What is thefrequency of the 4th over tone
(1) 284 Hz (2) 256 Hz
(3) 412 Hz (4) 438 Hz
17 A uniform cylinder of mass M and radius
R has a string wrapped around it Thestring is held fixed and the cylinder falls
vertically as in figure Find the tension in
the string
R
T
(1)Mg
3 (2)
Mg
4 (3)
Mg
6 (4)
Mg
8
18 Energy levels A B C of a certain atomcorresponds to values of energy
A B C E E and E 1 2λ λ and 3λ are the
wavelengths of radiations corresponding
to the transitions C to B B to A and C to
A respectively as shown in figure below
λ1
λ2 λ3
( )CC E
( )BB E
( )AA E
Ifλ λ
λ =λ + λ
1 23
1 2
then which of the
following is correct
(1) A BE E983100
(2) A B CE E E983102 983102
(3) A B CE E E983100 983100 (4) A C BE E E983102 983100
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 622
6
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 6
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
19 Photoelectric emission is observed from
a surface for frequencies 1f and 2f forthe incident radiation ( )1 2f f
983102
If the
maximum kinetic energies of the
photoelectrons in the two cases are in
the ratio 1 k then the threshold
frequency ν
is given by
(1) 2 1f f
k 1
minus
minus (2) 2 1k f f
k 1
minus
minus
(3) 1 2k f f
k 1
minus
minus (4) 2 1f f
k
minus
20 The element curium 24896Cm has a
mean life of 1310 seconds Its primary
decay modes are spontaneous fission
and alpha decay the former with a
probability of x Each fission releases
200 MeV of energy The masses involved
in α minus decay are as follows
=24896Cm 24807 2220 u
=21494Pu 244064100 u
=42He 400 2603 u
If a sample of 2010 Cm atoms produces
a power output of5
33 10 W minus
times what isthe value of x
(1) 32 (2) 16
(3) 64 (4) 8
21 An object is placed at A (OA gt f) Here f
is the focal length of the lens Theimage is formed at B A perpendicular
erected between O and C is chosen
such that = BCA 90 Let OA = a OB = b
and OC = c Then the value of f i s
A B
C
O
(1)( )
3
2
a b
c
+ (2)
2c
a b
+
(3)( )
( )
a b c
a c
+
+ (4)
2a
a b c
+ +
22 In Youngrsquos double slit experiment
fringes are obtained on a screen
placed at some distance from the
plane of slits If the screen is moved by25 10 mminustimes towards the slits the change
in fringe width is minustimes 53 10 m If the
distance between the slits is 310 m minus
calculate the wavelength of light used
(1) 6000 A (2) 5500 A
(3) 4500 A (4) 6500 A
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 722
7
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 7
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
23 A body cools in a surrounding which is
at a constant temperature of θ0 Its
temperature θ is plotted against time
lsquotrsquo Tangents are drawn to the curve at
the points ( )θ = θ2P and ( )θ = θ1Q
These tangents meet the time axis at
angles of 2φ and 1φ as shown in figure
Then
θ2
θ1
θ0
P
Q
φ1φ2
θ
t
(1) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 01
2 1 0
cot
cot
(2) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 02
1 1 0
cot
cot
(3) 1 2
2 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
(4) 2 2
1 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
24 A gas undergoes a change of state
during which 100 J of heat is supplied toit and it does 20 J of work The system is
brought back to its original state
through a process during which 20 J of
heat is released by the gas What is the
work done by the gas in the second
process
(1) 20 J (2) 40 J
(3) 60 J (4) 80 J
25 In the circuit shown in figure the switch
S is kept in position 1 for a long time and
then it is shifted to position 2 at t = 0 Theenergy dissipated as thermal energy
through resistor R in time t = 0 to2 L
tR
=
is
E
L
S1
2
R
(1)2
2
L E
2R (2)
2 2
2 2
L E e 1
2R e
minus
(3) ( )2
4
2
L E1 e
2Rminus (4)
2 4
2 4
L E e 1
2R e
minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 622
6
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 6
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
19 Photoelectric emission is observed from
a surface for frequencies 1f and 2f forthe incident radiation ( )1 2f f
983102
If the
maximum kinetic energies of the
photoelectrons in the two cases are in
the ratio 1 k then the threshold
frequency ν
is given by
(1) 2 1f f
k 1
minus
minus (2) 2 1k f f
k 1
minus
minus
(3) 1 2k f f
k 1
minus
minus (4) 2 1f f
k
minus
20 The element curium 24896Cm has a
mean life of 1310 seconds Its primary
decay modes are spontaneous fission
and alpha decay the former with a
probability of x Each fission releases
200 MeV of energy The masses involved
in α minus decay are as follows
=24896Cm 24807 2220 u
=21494Pu 244064100 u
=42He 400 2603 u
If a sample of 2010 Cm atoms produces
a power output of5
33 10 W minus
times what isthe value of x
(1) 32 (2) 16
(3) 64 (4) 8
21 An object is placed at A (OA gt f) Here f
is the focal length of the lens Theimage is formed at B A perpendicular
erected between O and C is chosen
such that = BCA 90 Let OA = a OB = b
and OC = c Then the value of f i s
A B
C
O
(1)( )
3
2
a b
c
+ (2)
2c
a b
+
(3)( )
( )
a b c
a c
+
+ (4)
2a
a b c
+ +
22 In Youngrsquos double slit experiment
fringes are obtained on a screen
placed at some distance from the
plane of slits If the screen is moved by25 10 mminustimes towards the slits the change
in fringe width is minustimes 53 10 m If the
distance between the slits is 310 m minus
calculate the wavelength of light used
(1) 6000 A (2) 5500 A
(3) 4500 A (4) 6500 A
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 722
7
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 7
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
23 A body cools in a surrounding which is
at a constant temperature of θ0 Its
temperature θ is plotted against time
lsquotrsquo Tangents are drawn to the curve at
the points ( )θ = θ2P and ( )θ = θ1Q
These tangents meet the time axis at
angles of 2φ and 1φ as shown in figure
Then
θ2
θ1
θ0
P
Q
φ1φ2
θ
t
(1) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 01
2 1 0
cot
cot
(2) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 02
1 1 0
cot
cot
(3) 1 2
2 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
(4) 2 2
1 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
24 A gas undergoes a change of state
during which 100 J of heat is supplied toit and it does 20 J of work The system is
brought back to its original state
through a process during which 20 J of
heat is released by the gas What is the
work done by the gas in the second
process
(1) 20 J (2) 40 J
(3) 60 J (4) 80 J
25 In the circuit shown in figure the switch
S is kept in position 1 for a long time and
then it is shifted to position 2 at t = 0 Theenergy dissipated as thermal energy
through resistor R in time t = 0 to2 L
tR
=
is
E
L
S1
2
R
(1)2
2
L E
2R (2)
2 2
2 2
L E e 1
2R e
minus
(3) ( )2
4
2
L E1 e
2Rminus (4)
2 4
2 4
L E e 1
2R e
minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 722
7
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 7
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
23 A body cools in a surrounding which is
at a constant temperature of θ0 Its
temperature θ is plotted against time
lsquotrsquo Tangents are drawn to the curve at
the points ( )θ = θ2P and ( )θ = θ1Q
These tangents meet the time axis at
angles of 2φ and 1φ as shown in figure
Then
θ2
θ1
θ0
P
Q
φ1φ2
θ
t
(1) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 01
2 1 0
cot
cot
(2) θ minus θφ
= φ θ minus θ
2 02
1 1 0
cot
cot
(3) 1 2
2 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
(4) 2 2
1 1
cot
cos
φ θ=
φ θ
24 A gas undergoes a change of state
during which 100 J of heat is supplied toit and it does 20 J of work The system is
brought back to its original state
through a process during which 20 J of
heat is released by the gas What is the
work done by the gas in the second
process
(1) 20 J (2) 40 J
(3) 60 J (4) 80 J
25 In the circuit shown in figure the switch
S is kept in position 1 for a long time and
then it is shifted to position 2 at t = 0 Theenergy dissipated as thermal energy
through resistor R in time t = 0 to2 L
tR
=
is
E
L
S1
2
R
(1)2
2
L E
2R (2)
2 2
2 2
L E e 1
2R e
minus
(3) ( )2
4
2
L E1 e
2Rminus (4)
2 4
2 4
L E e 1
2R e
minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 822
8
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 8
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
26 For the lsquoLCRrsquo circuit shown in figure
below what is the power factor= = 1 2Given V 158 V V 200 V
1V
2V
=V 250 V
(1)1
5 (2)
2
5
(3)3
5
(4)4
5
27 The energy of a particle executing SHM
is given by = π +2 2 2E 2 x 8 v where x is
the displacement and v is the velocity
The period of oscillation is
(1) 05 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 2 2 s
28 A current i increases at a steady rate in
a long straight wire A small circular loop
of radius 310 mminus has its plane parallel to
the wire and is placed at a distance of
1m from the wire If the induced emf is
151344 10 V minusπ times then the variation of
the current lsquoirsquo with time t in units of
minus 210 A s is
LoopWire
1m
(1) 308 (2) 402
(3) 512 (4) 672
29 Two tuning forks with natural
frequencies of 340 Hz each move
relative to a stationary observer One
fork moves away from the observer
while the other moves towards him at
the same speed The observer hears
beats of frequency 3 Hz What is the
speed of the tuning fork The speed of
sound in air is 340 ms
(1) 15 ms (2) 33 ms
(3) 45 ms (4) 70 ms
30 An air bubble of 2 cm diameter rises
steadily through water of density
1000 kg minus 3m at the rate of 2 mms
Calculate the viscosity of water
=
2
[Given g 10 m s ]
(1) 890 Pa minus s (2) 1011 Pa minus s
(3) 1110 Pa minus s (4) 1310 Pa minus s
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 922
9
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 9
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
31 The lines ( )minus + + =2x p p 1 y q 0 and
( ) ( )+ + + + =2
2 2p 1 x p 1 y 2q 0 are perpen-
dicular to a common line for
(1) exactly one value of p
(2) exactly two values of p
(3) more than two values of p
(4) no value of p
32 The remainder when ( ) +
minus2n 12n8 62 is
divided by 9 is(1) 2 (2) 7
(3) 8 (4) 0
33 If 1 2 na a a are in HP then the
expression minus+ + + =1 2 2 3 n 1 na a a a a a
(1) 1 nn a a
(2) ( )minus 1 nn 1 a a
(3) ( )minus1 nn a a
(4) ( ) ( )minus minus1 nn 1 a a
34 The area enclosed between the curve( )= +ey log x e and the coordinate axes
is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
35 If the roots of + + =2x ax b 0 are of the
form α + α k and the roots of
2x bx a 0+ + = are of the form β + β k
where k R+isin and a and b are different
then a b 8+ + is equal to
(1) 4 (2) ndash 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
36 In ABC LC
2
π∆ = If r is the inradius and R
is the circum radius of the triangle ABC
then ( )2 r R+ =
(1) b c+ (2) a b+
(3) a b c+ + (4) c a+
37 If1 1 1
0x y z
+ + = then the value of
+
+
+
1 x 1 1
1 1 y 1
1 1 1 z
is
(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) xyz (4) ndash xyz
PART B MATHEMATICS
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1022
10
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 10
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
38 Number of points from where
perpendicular tangents to the curve2 2x y1
64 81minus = can be drawn is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) none of these
39 Which of the following statements isincorrect
(1) ( )x sgn x x=
(2) ( )x sgn x x=
(3) ( ) ( )x sgn x sgn x x=
(4) ( )3
x sgn x x=
40 If a bcd are odd natural numbers
such that a b c d 20 + + + = then the
number of values of the orderedquadruplet (a b c d) is
(1) 165 (2) 455
(3) 310 (4) none of these
41 Given that for allminus +
isin+ +
2
2
1 x 2x 4x R
3 x 2x 4983100
lt
3 then2x x
2x x
9 3 6 3 4
9 3 6 3 4
times + times +
times minus times + lies between
(1)
1
2 and 2 (2) 0 and 2
(3)1
3 and 3 (4) 0 and 3
42 The expression
( )n n1 5y 1 1 5y 11
2 25y 1
+ + minus + times minus +
is a polynomial of degree 5 then n =
(1) 11 (2) 13 (3) 9 (4) 10
43 The locus of the mid-point of the linesegment joining the focus to a moving
point on the parabola 2y 4 ax= is
another parabola with directrix
(1) = minusx a (2)a
x2
minus=
(3)x = 0
(4)a
x 2=
44 On the portion of the linex y
13 4
+ =
intercepted between the axes a squareis constructed away from the originCoordinates of the vertex of squarewhich is farthest from origin is
(1) (3 8) (2) (6 4) (3) (7 3) (4) (4 7)
45 If the vectors a i j k i b j kand and and and and and
+ + + + and
( )and and and
+ + ne ne nei j ck a 1 b 1 c 1 are coplanar
then the value of1 1 1
1 a 1 b 1 c
+ +
minus minus minus
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 0 (4) none of these
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1122
11
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 11
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
46 ( ) ( ) ( )1 1 1cos cos 3 sin cos13 tan tan 7minus minus minus+ +
equals
(1) 32
πminus (2)
53
2
πminus
(3) 32
πminus (4) 3π minus
47 Four numbers are chosen from 1 2 3hellip200 The probability that they are in GPis
(1)
4C
36
200 (2)
4C
35
200
(3)
4C
20
200 (4) none of these
48 The remainder when 10 5127 7+ is
divided by 10 is
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 0
49 If2 2 2
1 2 1 2z z z z + = + then 1
2
z
z is
(1) real
(2) 1
2
z1
z=
(3) 1 2z z 1=
(4) 1
2
z
z is purely imaginary
50 The number of points at which
2x 5x 6 cos xminus + + is not differentiable
is
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 0
512
2
0
x 1 dx minusint (where [] stands for the
greatest integer function is
(1) 5 2 3minus minus (2) 2 2 3minus minus
(3) 3 2 3minus minus (4) 4 2 3minus minus
52 The solution of the differential equation
2y dx x dy x y dyminus = is
(1) 2y x 2x 2 cy+ = (2)2x y 2y 2 cx+ =
(3) x y 2x 2 cy+ = (4) none of these
53 In ∆ ABC 2 2a 3b= and A B2
πminus = Then
the triangle is
(1) equilateral (2) right-angled
(3) isosceles (4) none of these
54 Which of the following points is a focus
of the hyperbola minus +2 29x 16y 18x
+ minus =32y 151 0983103
(1) (1 4) (2) (4 1)
(3) minus minus( 6 1) (4) minus(6 1)
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1222
12
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 12
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
55 If
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
minus minus minus
∆ = minus minus minus
minus minus minus
2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2
x 1 x 3 x 5
x 3 x 5 x 7
x 5 x 7 x 9
= + + +3 2ax bx cx d
then the value of a is
(1) 1 (2) minus1
(3) 2 (4) 0
56 The largest term in the sequence
2
n 3
na
n 256=
+ is
(1) 10a (2) 7a
(3) 8a (4) 9a
57 The reflection of the point minus minus(5 8 4) on
the linex 1 y 1 z 10
2 3 8
minus + += =
minus is
(1) minus minus(3 4 2) (2) (1 1 0)
(3) minus(1 1 0) (4) (1 0 0)
58rarrinfin
+ + + +
+ + + 4 4 4n
1 8 27 1lt
2nn 1 n 16 n 81
equals
(1)1
log 24
(2) 1
log 23
(3) log 2 (4) none of these
59 If2 7
tan x tan18 18
π π are in AP and if
2 5tan y tan
18 18
π π are also in AP then
x
y
equals
(1)1
2 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) none of these
60 The line of intersection of the planes
minus minus minus minus minus + =
r 3 i j k 1 and r i 4 j 2k 2
minus minus minus minus + minus =
is parallel to the vector
(1) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
minus minus + (2) 2 i 7 j 13 k
minus minus minus
+ +
(3) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
minus + + (4) 2 i 7 j 13 kminus minus minus
+ minus
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1322
13
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 13
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
61 Which one of the following statementsabout the zeolites is wrong
(1) They are used as cation exchangers
(2) They have open structure which enables
them to take up small molecules
(3) Zeolites are aluminosilicates having
three dimensional network
(4) Some of the minus 44SiO units are
replaced by minus 54AlO and minus 9
6AlO ions
in zeolites
62 At 353K the vapour pressure of pureliquid A is 520 torr and that of pure liquidB is 1000 torr If an ideal mixture ofsolution of A and B boils at 353K and 1
atmospheric pressure the amount of Ain the mixture is (1 atm = 760 torr or 760
mm of Hg)
(1) 50 mole percent
(2) 60 mole percent
(3) 34 mole percent
(4) 48 mole percent
63 The value of infinλm for KCl and 3KNO are
14986 and 154961 2 1
cm molminus minus
Ω Alsoinfin minus
λm Cl is 7144 minus minus1 2 1ohm cm mol The
value of infin minusλm 3NO is
(1) minus minus1 2 17634 o hm cm mol
(2) 1 2 113308 o hm cm molminus minus
(3) 1 2 1377 ohm cm molminus minus
(4) 1 2 15496 ohm cm molminus minus
64 If pK for a reaction
(g) (g) (g) (g)A 2B 3C D+ + is 005 at
1000 K its cK in terms of R will be
(1) 2 0000 R (2) 002 R
(3) minustimes
55 10 R (4) minus minustimes
5 15 10 R
65 Boric acid and 3BF are isoelectronic But
3BF is a gas but boric acid is a solid
because
(1) in 3BF Fminus is smaller in size than OHminus
in boric acid
(2) 3BF is a Lewis acid while boric acid is
not
(3) no molecular association is possible
in3
BF while it is possible in boric
acid
(4) the geometrical structures of two
molecules are different
PART C CHEMISTRY
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1422
14
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 14
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
66 The degree of dissociation (α) of a weak
electrolyte x yA B is related to vanrsquot Hofffactor (i) by the expression as
(1)x y 1
i 1
+ minusα =
minus (2)
x y 1
i 1
+ +α =
minus
(3)minus
α =+ minus
i 1
(x y 1) (4)
minusα =
+ +
i 1
(x y 1)
67 Of the five ∆H values required to
calculate the lattice energy of an
electrolyte using the Born-Haber cycle
the one that is most difficult to measure
is
(1) The electron affinity of the non
metal
(2) The ionisation energy of metal
(3) The enthalpy of sublimation of metal
(4) The enthalpy of formation of
gaseous atoms of the non metal
68 In a mixture of liquids A and B showing
negative deviation is characteristic of
(1) mixV 0∆ gt
(2) mixV 0∆ lt
(3) A minus B interaction is weaker than
A minus A and B minus B interaction
(4) do not form a solution
69 Which of the following gas has the
highest enthalpy of combustion
(1) methane (2) ethane
(3) ethene (4) ethyne
70 Molar conductivity of an aqueous solution
is 2 2 1126 10 S cm molminus
times Its molarity is001 its specific conductivity will be in
1 1S cm molminus minus
(1) 5126 10minustimes (2) 00063
(3) 403 10minustimes (4) minus
times7126 10
71 Which of the following is not a reaction
of first order
(1) OH
3 2 5 2CH COOC H H Ominus
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(2) H3 2 5 2CH COOC H H O
+
+ rarr
3 2 5CH COOH C H OH+
(3) H
12 22 11 2C H O H O+
+ rarr Glucose +
Fructose ( )6 12 6C H O
(4) 2 2 2 22H O 2H O O rarr +
72 The nucleus resulting from 23892U after
successive loss of two alpha and four
beta particles is
(1)
230
90Th (2)
230
94Pu
(3) 23088Ra (4) 230
92U
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1522
15
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 15
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
73 At isoelectric point
(1) Colloidal solution becomes highly
stable
(2) Peptisation can be carried out
(3) Colloidal phase particles become
uncharged
(4) Colloidal particles can move to
cathode or anode
74 The metallic lustre exhibited by sodium is
explained by
(1) diffusion of sodium ions
(2) oscillation of loose electrons
(3) excitation of free protons
(4) existence of body centred cubic
lattice
75 Element (M) forms water soluble
sulphate 4(MSO ) water unsoluble
hydroxide 2M(OH) and oxide MO which
becomes inert on heating MOH is
soluble in NaOH Element M is
(1) Be (2) Mg (3) Ca (4) Sr
76 Among the following species the
isostructural pairs are ( minus3 3 3NF NO BF
)3 3H O HN+
(1) +minus 3 3 3 3NF NO and BF H O
(2) minus 3 3 3 3NF HN and NO BF
(3) + minus 3 3 3 3NF H O and NO BF
(4) + 3 3 3 3NF H O and HN BF
77 At its melting point ice is lighter thanwater because
(1) 2H O molecules are more closely
packed in solid state
(2) ice crystals have hollow hexagonal
arrangement of 2H O molecules
(3) on melting ice the water moleculesshrinks in size
(4) of hydrogen bonding
78 In metallurgy flux is a substance used toconvert
(1) infusible impurities to fusible material
(2) mineral into silicate
(3) soluble impurities into insolubleimpurities
(4) fusible impurities into infusibleimpurities
79 Lime stone is not used in which of thefollowing manufacturing processes
(1) Iron from haematite(2) Solvay process of baking soda
(3) Portland cement
(4) Phosphorus from phosphate
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1622
16
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 16
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
80 The crystal field splitting energy for
octahedral ( )∆o and tetrahedral ( )t∆ complexes is related to as
(1) ∆ = ∆t o4
9 (2) ∆ = ∆t o
1
2
(3) ∆ = ∆o t2 (4) ∆ = ∆o t4
9
81 The complex ionminus
3
6Fe(CN) and
minus
46Fe(CN)
(1) are both octahedral and para-
magnetic
(2) are both octahedral and diamag-
netic
(3) have same structure but oppositemagnetic property
(4) have different structure but same
magnetic property
82 IUPAC name of compound with the
structure
(1) 1 5 5-trimethylbicyclo [3 3 3] hept-1-ene
(2) 1 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-1-
ene
(3) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 3 3] hept-2-
ene
(4) 2 6 6-trimethylbicylo [3 1 1] hept-2-
ene
83 Which of the following statements is
wrong(1) Double bond is shorter than single
bond
(2) Sigma bond σ( ) is weaker than a
π(pi)bond
(3) Double bond is stronger than a single
bond
(4) Covalent bond is stronger than
hydrogen bond
84 In aminobenzene the minus 2NH group
(1) activates the benzene ring by both
inductive and resonance effects
(2) deactivates the benzene ring by
both inductive and resonance effects
(3) activates the benzene ring via
resonance effect and deactivates it
via (minus) inductive effect
(4) activates the benzene ring via
inductive effect and deactivates it
via resonance effect
85 The best reagent to distinguish between
ethylene dichloride (12-dichloroethane)
and ethylidene chloride (11-dichloro-
ethane) is to treat them separately with
(1) hot alcoholic KOH
(2) dilute aq KOH
(3) 3ZnCH OH
(4) Beilstein test
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1722
17
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 17
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
Cl 2CH OH
NC 2CH OH
86 Which one of the following alcohols is
least reactive towards HBr
(1)
(2) ( )6 5 2C H CHOH
(3) ( )6 5 3C H COH
(4)
88 Primary aliphatic amine can be
prepared from
(1) the reduction of nitroalkane or alkyl
cyanide with 2H Ni
(2) alkyl halide with potassio
phthalimide followed by hydrolysis
(3) by treating acid amide with
halogen and dilute alkali or NaOX
(4) by all of the above methods
87 Match List I (Reaction) with List II (Reagent) and select the correct answer from thecodes given below
List I (Reaction) List II (Reagent)
A Etard reaction P Hot alcoholic KOH
B Hydroxylation Q Anhydrous 3AlCl
C Dehydrohalogenation R Chromyl chloride
D Cannizzaro reaction S Dilute alkaline 4KMnO
T Methanal
A B C D
(1) P Q R S
(2) T S R P
(3) R S P T
(4) Q S P T
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1822
18
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 18
SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK
89 The products A B and C of the following reaction respectively are
C2NH OH
3CH CHO2I NaOH
3i CH MgBr inether
ii dil acid
B
A
(1) 3 2 3 2CH CH I CH CH OH minus =3CH CH NOH
(2) 3 3 3CHI CH CHOHCH minus =3CH CH NOH
(3) ( )3 2 3 3CH CH I CH COH minus3 2CH NH OH
(4) minus3 3 3CH COOH CH CHOH CH minus equiv3CH C N
90 Match List I with List II and select the correct answer from the codes given below
List I List II
A Natural polymer P Melmac
B Thermosetting polymer Q Sodium lauryl sulphate
C Broad spectrum antibiotic R Sodium strearate
D Detergent S Ampicillin
T Silk
A B C D
(1) T P S Q
(2) T P Q S
(3) Q R S T
(4) T R S Q
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 1922
19
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 19
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2022
20
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 20
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2122
21
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 21
983123983120983105983107983109 983110983119983122 983122983119983125983111983112 983127983119983122983115
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom
7252019 BMAT II Main Qns
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullbmat-ii-main-qns 2222
22
∆ Brilliant Tutorials Pvt Ltd IITBMAT2PMC(MAIN) - 22
983122983109983105983108 983124983112983109 983110983119983116983116983119983127983113983118983111 983113983118983123983124983122983125983107983124983113983119983118983123 983107983105983122983109983110983125983116983116983129
1 The candidates should fill in the required particulars on the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet(Side - -- - 1) with BlueBlack Ball Point Pen
2 For writingmarking particulars on Side----2 of the Answer Sheet use BlueBlack Ball PointPen only
3 The candidates should not write their Roll Numbers anywhere else (except in the specifiedspace) on the Test BookletAnswer Sheet
4 Out of the four options given for each question only one option is the correct answer
5 For each incorrect response one-fourth of the total marks allotted to the question would bededucted from the total score No deduction from the total score however will be made if noresponse is indicated for an item in the Answer Sheet
6 Handle the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet with care as under no circumstances (except fordiscrepancy in Test Booklet Code and Answer Sheet Code) will another set be provided
7 The candidates are not allowed to do any rough work or writing work on the Answer Sheet Allcalculationswriting work are to be done in the space provided for this purpose in the TestBooklet itself marked lsquoSpace for Rough Workrsquo This space is given at the bottom of each pageand in 3 pages at the end of the booklet
8 On completion of the test the candidates must hand over the Answer Sheet to the Invigilatoron duty in the RoomHall However the candidates are allowed to take away this TestBooklet with them
9 Each candidate must show on demand hisher Admit Card to the Invigilator
10 No candidate without special permission of the Superintendent or Invigilator should leavehisher seat
11 The candidates should not leave the Examination Hall without handing over their AnswerSheet to the Invigilator on duty and sign the Attendance Sheet again Cases where a
candidate has not signed the Attendance Sheet a second time will be deemed not to havehanded over the Answer Sheet and dealt with as an unfair means case The candidates arealso required to put their left hand THUMB impression in the space provided in theAttendance Sheet
12 Use of ElectronicManual Calculator and any Electronic Item like mobile phone etc isprohibited
13 The candidates are governed by all Rules and Regulations of the Board with regard to theirconduct in the Examination Hall All cases of unfair means will be dealt with as per Rules andRegulations of the Board
14 No part of the Test Booklet and Answer Sheet shall be detached under any circumstances
Candidates are not allowed to carry any textual material printed or written bits ofpapers pager mobile phone electronic device or any other material except the AdmitCard inside the examination hallroom